Canon | Powershot SX520 HS | User guide | Canon Powershot SX520 HS User guide

Canon Powershot SX520 HS User guide
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺴﻢ ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(١٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪©CANON INC. 2014‬‬
‫‪CEL-SV5AA2N1‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDHC‬‬
‫● ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDXC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫● ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻳًّﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻫﻞ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳُﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﺑﺎﻁ(‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻜﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ )= ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺯﻋﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﻮﺍ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺘﻨﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪٪٩٩٫٩٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˽( )˼(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)˾(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫)˽( )˼( )˻( )˺(‬
‫)˼˺(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˻˺(‬
‫)˼˺(‬
‫)˽˺(‬
‫)˾˺(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)˿˺(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)̀˺(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)́(‬
‫)˽˺(‬
‫)˺˺( )˹˺(‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ([ ‪] /‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪] :‬‬
‫)ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ([‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) ] :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ([ ‪] /‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ([‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫)‪(٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)̂(‬
‫)́(‬
‫)‪(٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٩‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫)‪ (١٠‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ – ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ([‬
‫)‪ (١١‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻗﻔﻞ([‬
‫)‪ (١٢‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫)‪ (١٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪ (١١‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫)‪ (١٢‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪ (١٣‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ / [(ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪ (١٤‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ([ ‪] /‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ([ ‪/‬‬
‫] )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ([‬
‫)‪(٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) AV OUT‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ HDMITM‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)‪ (١٣‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١٤‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)˻˺( )˺˺( )˹˺( )̂(‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ([‬
‫)‪[(Drive mode‬‬
‫[‬
‫)‪ (١٥‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC./SET‬‬
‫)‪ (١٦‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] )ﻓﻼﺵ([ ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫)‪ (١٧‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ([ ‪ /‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫)‪[(Macro‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )‪ (٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )‪ (١٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ )‪ (١٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ )‪ (١٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (١٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫● =‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﺍﻥ ” ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ“ ﻭ”‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ—ﺳﻮﺍء ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٢٤ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٢٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٢٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪٢ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٢ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪٢٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪٢ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٥ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪٢ ................................................................Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ‪٣ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٦ .....................................................................FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٧ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ‪١١ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪٢٨ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪١٢ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٢٣ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪٢٣ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪٢٨ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪٢٩ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪١٥ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٢٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪١٥ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪٢٩ ....................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪٣١ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٣١ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٣٢ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪٣٢ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٣٢ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪٣٣ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٣٤ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٣٤ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪٢٠ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪٣٥ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪١٥ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٦ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٦ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١٧ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١٧ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪١٨ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪١٨ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٩ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪٢٠ ....................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٢١ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٢ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪٣٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ – ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ( ‪٣٦ ..........‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻗﻔﻞ(‪٣٦ ...........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪٣٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٣٧ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‪٣٨ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪٣٩ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٩ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤٠ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪٤٠ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٤١ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ( ‪٥٢ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ( ‪٥٢ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ )ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪٥٣ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ( ‪٥٣ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٥٤ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪٥٤ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٥٤ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ‪٥٤ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ ‪٥٥ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪٥٥ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ( ‪٥٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٢ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪٤٢ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪٤٢ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٤٢ ................(٤:٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٤٣ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٤٣ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪٥٧ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٥٧ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٧ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‪٤٤ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‪٤٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٤٤ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪٤٥ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٤٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪٤٥ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٤٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٤٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٤٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٤٧ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪٤٨ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ‪٤٨ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( ‪٤٩ ....................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‪٥١ ................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪٥٨ ........................................................................... P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪٥٨ ..................................................... ([P‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٥٩ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪٥٩ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٥٩ .............................................. (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪٥٩ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٦٠ ..............................................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٦٠ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٦١ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٦١ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪٦١ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪٦١ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪٦٢ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٤٩ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪٥٠ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٦٣ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪٥٠ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪٦٣ .............................................................. (Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪٦٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪٦٤ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪٦٥ ........................................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪٦٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٦٥ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪٦٦ ..................................... (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪٦٦ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٦٧ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦٧ .................................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٦٨ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٦٨ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٦٨ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٦٨ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء ‪٦٨ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪٦٨ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٦٩ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦٩ .................................................................... FE‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٧٠ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٧٠ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪٧٠ ......................................................................... IS‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٧٠ ..........................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪٧١ ........................................................ M‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪٧١ ........................................................ ([Tv‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪٧٢ ..................................................... ([Av‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪٧٢ ............................... ([M‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٧٣ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٧٤ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٤ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ( ‪٧٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪٧٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪٧٦ .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪٧٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ ‪٧٧ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪٧٧ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪٧٧ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٧٨ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪٧٩ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٨٠ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٨٠ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٨٠ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٨١ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٨١ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٨٢ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٨٢ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪٨٣ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‪٨٣ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪٨٤ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪٨٤ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٨٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪٨٥ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪٨٥ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ‪٨٥ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‪٨٦ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪٨٦ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٨٦ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٨٦ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٨٧ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪٨٧ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٨٧ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪٨٨ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٨٨ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪٨٩ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪٩٠ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٩٠ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٩١ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٩٢ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٩٣ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪٩٤ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٩٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٩٤ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪٩٤ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ‪٩٥ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪٩٥ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪٩٥ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٩٦ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪٩٦ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٩٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٩٧ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪٩٧ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٩٧ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪٩٨ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪٩٨ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪٩٩ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ ‪٩٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪٩٩ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٩٩ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪١٠٠ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪١٠٠ ...............................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪١٠١ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪١٠١ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪١٠٢ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١٠٢ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٠٣ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪١٠٣ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪١٠٣ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٠٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٠٤ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪١٠٤ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪١٠٤ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ‪١٠٥ ............................................‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ‪١٠٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪١٠٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٠٧ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٠٧ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٠٧ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٠٨ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٠٨ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٠٩ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١١٠ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ‪١١٠ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١١١ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١١٢ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١١٢ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪١١٣ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ ‪١١٣ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١١٣ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١١٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪١١٤ ...............................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١١٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ‪١١٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١١٥ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١١٥ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١١٥ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪١١٥ .................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‪١١٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪١١٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪١١٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪١١٦ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪١١٧ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١١٧ ...................................................................Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪١١٨ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ‪١١٨ ..........................................................................Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ‪١١٩ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪١١٩ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٢٢ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٢٣ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪١٢٣ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪١٢٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪١٢٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٢٥ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪١٢٥ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٢٥ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٢٧ ............................................................................... FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٢٨ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪١٣٢ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪١٣٢ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ“ ‪١٣٣ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪١٣٣ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪١٣٣ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٣٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٣٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‪١٣٤ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪١٣٤ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١٣٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪١٣٥ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٣٥ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٣٦ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪١٣٦ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪١٣٦ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٣٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٣٦ .............................................................. NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٣٦ ...............................................CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‪١٣٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) LH-DC60‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪١٣٧ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪١٣٩ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ‪١٣٩ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫)= ‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ(‬
‫ = ‪٣١ = ،٢٩‬‬‫● ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪٤٩ = -‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪٤٨ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ = ‪٦٥ = ،٥٠ = ،٢٩‬‬‫● ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ = ‪٦٨ = ،٢٩‬‬‫● ﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ = ‪٥٥ = ،٣٩‬‬‫● ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪٤٠ = -‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫● ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪٣١ = -‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪٧٤ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫‪٨٠ = -‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ = ‪١٠٤‬‬‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ = ‪١٠٨‬‬‫● ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ = ‪٧٧‬‬‫● ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ = ‪٨٤‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ = ‪٥٧ = ،٢٩‬‬‫● ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ = ‪٧٤‬‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ = ‪١١٠‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫● ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٠٩ = -‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻔﻪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻜﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ( ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺒﺼﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺭﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ً‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻬﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻏﺰﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻤﻌﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﱠﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻄﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺰﻋﺎﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻄﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻜﻚ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺟﺮﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ– ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺳﺮﻭﺍﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫)˼(‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﺒﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﻘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪CB-2LY‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :CB-2LY‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )‪ (١‬ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫● ‪ :CB-2LYE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LYE‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ )‪ (١‬ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫● ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )= ‪.(١٣٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ(‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫)‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‪ ،(١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‪ ،(١‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺓ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ )‪ (١‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ )‪ (١‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ )= ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫[ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ‪ ،(١٠٢ = ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(١٨‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ" )= ‪(١٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ ﱠ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ )‪.(١‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )= ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ )= ‪.(٩٦‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪.(١٠٩‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪) .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˼(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٣١ = ،٢٩ = ،٢٠‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،P‬ﻭ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )= ‪.(٧١ = ،٥٨‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫)‪(٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪.(٥٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ )= ‪.(١٢٣‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (١٢٧‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪.(١٣٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )‪ (٢‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٠٠‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ ،(١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )= ‪.(١٣٣ = – ١٢٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪ (٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪ (١٠٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)= ‪(٩٦ = ،٩٦ = ،٢٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )= ‪(٧٢ = ،٧١‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(٣٤ = ،٣٣‬‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ ﱠ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )‪(.(٢‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ﺃﻭ ] [ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ ﱠ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺒﻂء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ )‪.(١‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(٢٩ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪“(Smart Auto‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٢٩‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(٢٩ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺰء ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٨٢‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )= ‪ (١٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )= ‪.(٩٥‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ < ]ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ < ]ﺑﻼ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ )= ‪.(٧٦‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻇﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ*‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎء ﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎء ﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪ (٥٨‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ(*‬
‫[ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ )‪.(Hybrid IS‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ )ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ )ﻓﻌّﺎﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪.(IS‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(٧٠‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.IS‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪ (٥٨‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٦٨‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻪ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺸﻴﺮ )‪ (١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‬‫)‪.(ZoomPlus‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫●‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫] [ < ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ – ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻗﻔﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ < (٢٧‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ < ]ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )=‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻚ ﺍﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٣٦‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ] [ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ )= ‪ (٦٥‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.Auto‬‬
‫[ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ،Auto‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪ ،(٣٩‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ <‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ < ]‬
‫]‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(“‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.(٣٧ =) Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ“ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ <‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ < ]ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٣٩‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫]ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ )= ‪.(١٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ [‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ[ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪(١١٠‬‬‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪ (١١٤‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪(١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪(٤:٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ٤٢٠) A2‬ﻣﻢ ‪ ٥٩٤ x‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٨٠ x ١٣٠‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ٢١٠ x ١٤٨ − ٤٢٠ x ٢٩٧) A5 – A3‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‪ ١٨٠ x ١٣٠ ،‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺳﺎءﺓ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﻮﻥ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﻜﺒﱢﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺧﻄﻮﻁ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ً‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪(٣٥‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪(٦٦ =) AF‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )= ‪(١٠٤‬‬‫● ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻷﻋﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪[AF-‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ]‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﺑﺄﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻆ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪.(٤١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺳﺮﻳﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻆ[ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ )= ‪ (٢٩‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺳﺮﻳﻊ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (٨٢‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (٨٧‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺘﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﻔﻮﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ )= ‪ ،(٨٤‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺙ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )= ‪ (٧٩‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ )= ‪.(٧٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (٨٢‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ (٧٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(٨١‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )= ‪ (٨٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (٨٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (٨٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١١٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ )= ‪ .(١١٦‬ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )= ‪ (٧٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ )= ‪ً (٧٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ً‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻃﻮﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ )ﺛﻠﺞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ )ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﻫﻲ ] [ )‪ (2304 x 1728‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻑ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٥١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٥١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ُﻋﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ )ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٥١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫● ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ .(٤٢‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ،٣‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﺌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٥١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺒﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥٠‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺒﺴﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﻤﻬﻢ ﺑﻮﺳﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٤٥‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻤﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥٠‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻏﻤﺰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﺑﺘﺄﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﻤﺰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺒﻂء‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻐﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٤٥‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ .(٦٥‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥٠‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٥٠‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻀﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﺎﻣﻚ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٤٥‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ] [ )‪ (2304 x 1728‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ١/٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ −2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )= ‪.(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٥٧‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )= ‪.(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪([P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٧٠ = – ٥٩‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (٦٠ =) ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ ،(٦٨ = ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ (٢٦ =) FUNC.‬ﻭ‪ (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[ )ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ١/٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،AE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺿﻤﻦ ]‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪،(AE‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪200 ،100‬‬
‫‪800 ،400‬‬
‫‪3200 ،1600‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ً‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ ،(WB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٦١‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ؛ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent H‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻖ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻤﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ )= ‪.(٦٢‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪ (٦١‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪.٥ – ١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪ (٦١‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ‪/‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺿﻌﻒ‪/‬ﺃﻓﺘﺢ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪.MF‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ MF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،١‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ (٦٥ =) AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ[ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٣٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ (٦٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )= ‪ ،(١٠٤‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ <‬
‫]ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ‪] < [MF-‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ < (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ < ]ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻦ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٫٦x‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٫٠x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٣٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪.(٤٤ =) AF‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(“‬
‫)= ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )] [ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺻﻐﻴﺮ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٣٥‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٦٤‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )= ‪ (٦٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻲء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪(٦٥=) “AF‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ ،(٦٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )= ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ )= ‪ (٦٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪.MF‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻄﺊ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ ،(٥٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ +2‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ١/٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،(٥٩ =) AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٦٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪] < [FE‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٢٧‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،FE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ FE‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ*‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ] [ )ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﻭ] [ )ﺩﻗﻴﻖ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪“IS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٧٠‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[IS‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.(٢٧ =) [2‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[IS‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ( )= ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪([Tv‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ“ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ١٫٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ [ ] ISO‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )= ‪.(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ]‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺫﻛﺎ ًء ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪([M‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪([Av‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ“ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٣٦‬ﻭ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ“ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ ،(٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪ً (٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪.(٣‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫● ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [–2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [+2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪) ٢‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ١٫٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ [ ] ISO‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٥٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[‬
‫< ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[<‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ < (٢٧‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[ < ]ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ[ < ]ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪،(٢٧ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[ < ]ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ )= ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (٧٥‬ﻫﻮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٣١‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫[ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (٨٢‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ )= ‪ (٨٤‬ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫● ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪” (٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ“ )= ‪ ،(٧٧‬ﻭ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(٨٠‬ﻭ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ“‬
‫)= ‪ .(٨٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ (٨٢‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ )= ‪” ،(٨٥‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪“(DPOF‬‬
‫)= ‪ (١١٤‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١١٦‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )= ‪ ،(٩٣ = – ٨٨‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 100‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪،‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ,‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪” (٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ“ )= ‪ ،(٧٧‬ﻭ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(٨٠‬ﻭ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ“‬
‫)= ‪ .(٨٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ (٨٢‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ )= ‪” ،(٨٥‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١١٤ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١١٦‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )= ‪ ،(٩١ = – ٨٨‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪ (٥٦ = ،٤٩‬ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،(٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ“ )= ‪ (٧٧‬ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ .(٨٠‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ (٨٢‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ )= ‪ (٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪“(DPOF‬‬
‫)= ‪ (١١٤‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(١١٦‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ < (٢٧‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[ < ]ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(٢٧‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٤٩‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ٍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫]ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ٍ‬
‫ﺑﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (٢٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )= ‪ ،(٧٧‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ[‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫● ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )= ‪(٧٧‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )= ‪(٧٩‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﱟ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫َﺮﺿﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٨٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌ َ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫)= ‪ .(٢٦‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪،٩٧‬‬
‫= ‪.(٩٨‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٨٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٨٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﺂﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻓﺘﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٨٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )= ‪.(٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )= ‪.(٨٢‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“ )= ‪،(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ“ )= ‪ ،(٨٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“ )= ‪،(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ )= ‪ (٨٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“ )= ‪ ،(٨٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪” ،(٧٤‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪” ،(٨٠‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(٨٢‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(٨٤‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪” ،(١١٤ =) “(DPOF‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )= ‪(١١٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ (٨٦‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ ،(٨١‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪ (٩١ = – ٨٨‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ )‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .Windows 7‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)˼( )˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ )‪ (٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )‪.(٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ] [ )= ‪.(٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ] [ )= ‪ (٤٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )= ‪.(٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪.(٦١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ٍ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] []‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫● ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪،(٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] []‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● )‪ (١‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺺ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﻣﻦ ] [( ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺺ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻓﻲ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻘﻂ ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺬﺕ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ‪.(١٠٢ = ،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ( )= ‪ (٣١‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (٧٦‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٢٧ =) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ (٧٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ (٢٦ =) FUNC.‬ﺃﻭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ .(٢٧‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(١٨‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ] ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ[ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (١٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ .(٢٣‬ﻭﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ )= ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(١٢٣‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (٩٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (١١٧ =) Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪،Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ (.‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﻠﻦ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪ (0001 – 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢،٠٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(٩٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(٩٧‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ( ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ ،0001‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )= ‪.((٩٧‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪ (١٠٧‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻳﻮﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )= ‪ ،(٢٩‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪،(٦٣ =) MF‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﻡ‪/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[ft/in‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫● ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )= ‪(١٠٤‬‬
‫● ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(١١٧ =) [Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪ (٩٥‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[ )= ‪(٩٥‬‬‫ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٩٩‬ﻭ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )= ‪(١٠٤‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )= ‪(٦١‬‬‫ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ]‬‫[ )= ‪ (٥٠‬ﻭ] [ )= ‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﺑﺎﻁ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*NB-6LH‬‬
‫‪*CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) USB‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪*(Mini-B :‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(AV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪AC ACK-DC40‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪LH-DC60‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪) Canon‬ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٦٧‬ﻣﻢ(*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪High-Power Flash HF-DC2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪.(IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪.FA-DC67A‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺤﻖ ﻟﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫● ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫● ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC ACK-DC40‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ً NB-6L‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪LH-DC60‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻮﻫﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪FA-DC67A‬‬
‫‪High-Power Flash HF-DC2‬‬
‫● ﻫﻮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫● ﻫﻮ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ٦٧‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )= ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI HTC-100‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﺷﻴﺌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC ACK-DC40‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٧‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ )‪ (١‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.((١٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ“ )= ‪ (١٠٤‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪(PAL‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٧‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ (٤٤ =) AF‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪MF-‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٦٣‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ LH-DC60‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (٢‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ ،(١‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪) FA-DC67A‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (٢‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ ،(١‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٦٧‬ﻣﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ]ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻦ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫● ‪ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬‫ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬‫● ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ ISP‬ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫‪Mac OS‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.8‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪.http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻬﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫)ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ )ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‪ .(١‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ‪،CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،[Canon‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ‪ :Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫[‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١١٠‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )= ‪.(١١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪.(١١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١١١‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١١١‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪ (١١٠‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ L‬ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٣٠ × ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(١١٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١١٠‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١١٢‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﺃﻭ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ )= ‪ (١١٥‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪.Digital Print Order Format (DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺮﺱ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ٍ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫)ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(١٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ )= ‪ (٨٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٥ = – ١١٤‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪(١٠٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﻠﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤُﺼ ِﻨﻊ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ .(١١٨‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬‫ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ*‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Eye-Fi‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،[Eye-Fi‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪*Eye-Fi‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (٢٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Eye-Fi‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺆ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ )= ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )= ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )= ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ً‬
‫● ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻔﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )= ‪.(١٠٤‬‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٦٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٥٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(٩٠ = ،٦٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٥٩ = ،٥٩‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪ ،(٧٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٥٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٥٩ = ،٥٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ .(١٨‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (١٢٨‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )= ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(٧٣ = ،٦٩‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٦٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ )= ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٦٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٦٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪ [AF-‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.macro‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪.(٦٧ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(٧٣ = ،٦٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٦٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﱡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪.(٤٣‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ (٤٦‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪ (٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ؛ ً‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺟﺮﺏ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﻲء‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪.(٩٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‪ ،‬ﻭ“ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ “FUNC.‬ﻭ“ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٢٨ = – ١٢٥‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٣٥ = ،٩٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪.(٩٨‬‬‫=‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ) ‪.(٤٣‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬‫[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[B‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٩٨‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )= ‪ (٩٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ )= ‪ ،(٩٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪ً (٥٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ )= ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(١١٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺠﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )= ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ )= ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ!‬
‫● ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )= ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )= ‪ (٢‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٧‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )*( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ* )= ‪ ،(٨٠‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ* )= ‪ ،(٨١‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ* )= ‪ ،(٨٦‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪ (٨٧‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ*‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٨٨‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ* )= ‪ ،(١١٤‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ* )= ‪.(١١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ ،(١١٥ = ،٨٦ = ،٨٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬
‫● ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١١٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ .(١١٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١١٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ (١١٦‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (٨٢‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ )= ‪ (٨٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪ (٨٧‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١١٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(١١٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ!‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪ (٩٨‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪.(٩٧‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (٧١ = ،٥٨ = ،٤٨ = ،٢٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ .(٨٨‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪ (٨٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻮءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(١٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻲ! )= ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪/MOV‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪MP4‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺌﻪ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١١٠‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )= ‪ .(١١٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)˺˼(‬
‫)˻˼(‬
‫)˼˼(‬
‫)˽˼(‬
‫)˾˺( )˽˺( )˼˺( )˻˺()˺˺( )˹˺( )̂(‬
‫)˿˺(‬
‫)̀˺(‬
‫)́˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)̂˺(‬
‫)˹˻(‬
‫)˺˻(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)˿˼()˾˼( )˻˻(‬
‫)́(‬
‫)́˼( )̀˼(‬
‫)˹˼( )̂˻( )́˻( )̀˻(‬
‫)˹˽(‬
‫)˿˻( )˾˻(‬
‫)˽˻( )˼˻(‬
‫)̂˼(‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ (١١‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫)‪ (١٢‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )= ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫)‪ (١٣‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ )= ‪(١٣٥‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫‪(٤١ =) Drive mode‬‬
‫)‪ (١٤‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪،(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ )= ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫)‪(٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫)‪(٨‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫)‪(٩‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )= ‪،(٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫)‪ (١٠‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )= ‪*(١٣٥‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)‪ (١٥‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )= ‪،(٦٣ = ،٦٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪(٦٧ =) AF‬‬
‫)‪ (١٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ ،(١٢٥‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )= ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫)‪ (١٧‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪(٦٥ =) AF‬‬
‫)‪ (١٨‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ )= ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)‪ (١٩‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ )= ‪(٦٨‬‬
‫)‪ (٣٠‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(٦٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٠‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫)‪ (٣١‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )= ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫)‪ (٢١‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ /‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)= ‪(٧٣ = ،٦٩‬‬
‫)‪ (٣٢‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪(٣٤ =) IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫)‪ (٢٢‬ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫)‪ (٢٣‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(١١٧ =) Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)‪ (٢٥‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(٧٢ = ،٧١‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٦‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪(٥٩ =) AE‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٧‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )= ‪(٧٢ = ،٧٢‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٨‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٩‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫)˽˺( )˼˺( )˻˺( )˺˺( )˹˺( )̂( )́(‬
‫)‪ (٣٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫)‪(٣٤‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٤‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،(٥٩=) AE‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪(٦٩=) FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)‪ (٣٥‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫)˾˺(‬
‫)‪ (٣٦‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪(٦٣ =) MF‬‬
‫)˿˺(‬
‫)̀˺(‬
‫)́˺(‬
‫)̂˺(‬
‫)˹˻(‬
‫)˺˻(‬
‫)˻˻(‬
‫)‪ (٣٧‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )= ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫)‪ (٣٨‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫)‪ (٣٩‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫)‪ (٤٠‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫)˿˻( )˾˻( )˽˻(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ—ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ—ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(٧٤ = ،٢٩‬‬
‫)‪ (١٣‬ﻣﻨﻘﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(١١٧ =) Eye-Fi‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )= ‪(٩٠ = ،٦١‬‬
‫)‪ (١٤‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ – ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )= ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ )= ‪(٧٦‬‬
‫)‪ (١٥‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )= ‪(٧٩‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( )= ‪ / (٧٠‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫)= ‪) MOV ،(٤٢‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫)‪ (١٦‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( )= ‪،٧١‬‬
‫= ‪ ،(٧٢‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( )= ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪(٨٢‬‬
‫)‪(٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫)‪(٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪،(٥٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫)‪(٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(٦٠ =) ISO‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫)‪ (١٧‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )= ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫)‪ (١٨‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪ ،(٦٨‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫)‪ (١٩‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٩٠ = ،٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٠‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )= ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫)‪ (٢١‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫)‪ (١٠‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪(١٢٥‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪(١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪(١٣٥‬‬
‫)‪ (١٢‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٣‬ﻭﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪(١٨‬‬
‫)‪ (١١‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)˼˻(‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫]ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ[‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)‪ (٢٤‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫)‪ (٢٥‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )= ‪.(١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)‪ (٢٦‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪(٩١ = ،٤٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“‬
‫)= ‪.(٧٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )= ‪) (٩٣‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪) (٩٣‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )= ‪((٩٣‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫* ‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(٦٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪(٤١ =) Drive Mode‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ )= ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.(١١٠ =) PictBridge‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )= ‪(٧٣ = ،٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )= ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ٢‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪(٢٥‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )= ‪(٦٣ = ،٦٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(٧٢ = ،٧١ =) Av/Tv‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪(٦٦ =) AF‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AE‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪/‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(٧٣‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪/AE‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪*(٦٩ = ،٥٩ =) FE‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻼﺵ )= ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‪/ ٢‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﻥ ]ﻏﺎﻣﻖ ‪ -‬ﻓﺎﺗﺢ[ )= ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ FE‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ] [ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ*‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ١‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ١‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )= ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )= ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ٥‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ :٥ – ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪*(٦٥ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )= ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪(٦٥ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪١*AiAF‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪1.6x/2.0x‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪(٤٤ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪(٤٥ =) AF-‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻦ )= ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪(٦٧ =) AF‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪(٦٣ =) MF-‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 4/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 8/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )= ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ )= ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﻂ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )= ‪(٣٨ = ،٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻼ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(٧٠ =) IS‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ[‪.‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫= ‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫= ‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫= ‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫= ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫= ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫= ‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫= ‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫= ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫= ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫= ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫= ‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫= ‪٩٦ = ،٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫= ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫= ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫= ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫= ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫= ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫= ‪٩٨ = ،٩٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫= ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫= ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫= ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫= ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫= ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫= ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫= ‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫= ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫= ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫= ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫= ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫= ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫= ‪١١٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫= ‪١١٥‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻕ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫= ‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪١١٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫= ‪٨٦‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫= ‪٨٧‬‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫= ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫= ‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫= ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫= ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪1.6x‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪2.0x‬‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ‪mm‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪) 4.3 :٤٢x‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( – ‪ 180.6‬ﱠ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ‪(mm‬‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪) 24 :‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( – ‪ 1008‬ﱠ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD TFT‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٧٫٥‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ٤٦١،٠٠٠ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ،Design rule for Camera File system‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪Exif 2.3 (JPEG) :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) MOV :‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 :‬؛ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪Linear :‬‬
‫‪) PCM‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ((‬
‫‪Hi-speed USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ )ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ )‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC ACK-DC40‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫)ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫‪ ٤٤١‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٤١٧‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫‪ ٩١٫٩ x ٨١٫٧ x ١٢٠٫٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٤٠٣٢ – ٢٤‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ١٦١٢٫٨ – ٣٨٫٤‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٠١٦٫٠ – ٤٨٫٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ* (‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪Camera & Imaging‬‬
‫)‪.Products Association (CIPA‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪Pixels‬‬
‫)ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪16M/4608x3456‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪8M/3264x2448‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪3M/2048x1536‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪0.3M/640x480‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪1058‬‬
‫‪4272‬‬
‫‪ ٣٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ١٤‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ١٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪1705‬‬
‫‪6883‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ٤٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٠٣‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭ‪ ٣١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪1996‬‬
‫‪8059‬‬
‫‪3069‬‬
‫‪12391‬‬
‫‪4723‬‬
‫‪19064‬‬
‫‪8469‬‬
‫‪34184‬‬
‫‪27291‬‬
‫‪110150‬‬
‫‪40937‬‬
‫‪165225‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 4‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‬
‫(‬
‫(‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ – ‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٠ – ١٫٣‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫(‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ١٫٣‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ١٫٣‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٥٠ – ٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ١٫٣‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫(‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ١٫٦‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫[‬
‫‪ 1/2000 – 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪،1.3 ،1.6 ،2 ،2.5 ،3.2 ،4 ،5 ،6 ،8 ،10 ،13 ،15‬‬
‫‪،1/8 ،1/6 ،1/5 ،1/4 ،0.3 ،0.4 ،0.5 ،0.6 ،0.8 ،1‬‬
‫‪،1/50 ،1/40 ،1/30 ،1/25 ،1/20 ،1/15 ،1/13 ،1/10‬‬
‫‪،1/250 ،1/200 ،1/160 ،1/125 ،1/100 ،1/80 ،1/60‬‬
‫‪،1/1000 ،1/800 ،1/640 ،1/500 ،1/400 ،1/320‬‬
‫‪1/2000 ،1/1600 ،1/1250‬‬
‫[*‬
‫* ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ ١٠٦٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤٠ – ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦٫٩ × ٤١٫٨ × ٣٤٫٤‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫)ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‬
‫‪) f/3.4 – f/8.0‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪ f/6.0 – f/8.0 ،‬ﱠ‬
‫‪f/8.0 ،f/7.1 ،f/6.3 ،f/5.6 ،f/5.0 ،f/4.5 ،f/4.0 ،f/3.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٫٠٨٥‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ )‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٠٥‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ )‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬
‫‪ ٤٫٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ٠٫٧ ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮﻳﻦ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠ – ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) LH-DC60‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ٢٧٫٠ × ٦٩٫٦ :‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪٦٥ (AF‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪) CameraWindow‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫‪١١٤ DPOF‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﺗﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪) Macro‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ( ‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪١١٠ ،١٠٣ PictBridge‬‬
‫‪) Tv‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٦٥ AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪٤٣ ،٤٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪٩٠ ،٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ← ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ← ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٦٥ AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪٤٤ AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦٧ AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ( ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫← ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪٣٥ ،٣٠ ،٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪١١٢ ،٨٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ‪١٥ ،٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪١٢٤ ،١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ← ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ← ١٠٢‬ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ← ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫← ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪٤٦ ،٤٥ ،٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪) Auto‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٢٩ ،٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪١١٠ ،١٠٥ ،١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪٦٥ (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٥٨ AE‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪١١٧ ،٢ Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ← SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٩٠ ،٦٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺴﻢ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪٦٦ AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٩١ ،٤٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺙ‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺛﻠﺞ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ← ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪١٠٥ ،١٠٢ AC‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻟﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ‪١٣٣ ،١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٥٩ AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦٧ AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦٩ FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٥٩ AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦٩ FE‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ ← ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪١٠٤ ،١٠٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪١٠٤ (AV‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪١٠٤ ،١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٦٠ ISO‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٠٢ ،٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪٦٣ Macro‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬
‫● ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video‬‬
‫‪and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only‬‬
‫‪(1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video‬‬
‫‪provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use‬‬
‫‪for MPEG-4 standard.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫● ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising